Journey
O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L
2 0 1 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 89
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................177
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................291
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 379
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................401
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................459
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 477
10
INDEX
...................................................................487
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual.
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ............ 12
▫ KeyFOB ........................... 13
▫ Tip Start Feature ...................... 14
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition ......... 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 .......................... 15
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
▫ General Information ................... 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 17
▫ Rearming Of The System ................ 17
▫ To Arm The System ................... 17
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 18
䡵 Illuminated Entry ...................... 18
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 20
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .......... 22
2
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 23
▫ Remote Open Window Featuree ........... 23
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 23
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 24
▫ General Information ................... 25
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 25
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 25
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 28
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 28
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 29
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) ......................... 32
䡵 Windows ............................ 34
▫ Power Windows ...................... 34
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 37
䡵 Liftgate ............................. 38
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 39
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 41
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 46
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 47
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 47
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . 48
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 52
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 53
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 53
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Airbags ............................ 54
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features .......... 56
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 61
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 69
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 71
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 83
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 84
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 84
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 85
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 86
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 88
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The de-
tented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3—ON
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE:
•
You can insert the double-sided emergency key into
the lock cylinder with either side up.
•
Only the drivers door is equipped with a lock cylinder.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Key Fob to briefly
turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for
approximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is pro-
grammable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is LOCK or
ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This
condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not
compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key
Fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
the authorized dealer.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) system monitors the
vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry. If
something triggers the alarm, the system will sound the
horn intermittently, flash the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and flash the Vehicle Security Light
in the instrument cluster.
Rearming of the System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after three
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
To Arm the System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the
vehicle.
2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door
LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
NOTE: The system will not arm if you lock the doors
with the manual door LOCK plungers or the door LOCK
cylinder on the driver’s door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
3. Close all doors. The Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash to signal that the system is
arming. During this period, opening any door or the
liftgate will cancel the arming process.
NOTE: For added security, whenever the Security
Alarm is armed, the HomeLink威/Garage Door Opener
(if equipped) is disabled as well.
To Disarm the System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition lock
cylinder and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
Unlocking the doors with the manual door LOCK
plungers or the door LOCK cylinder on the driver’s
door will not disarm the system.
•
When the system is armed, the interior power door
LOCK switches will not unlock the doors.
The Security Alarm system is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If the previously
described arming sequence has occurred, the system will
arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the
vehicle. If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or open a door or the liftgate.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if
equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition switch is turned ON.
NOTE: The illuminated entry system will not operate
the interior lights if the Dimmer Control is in the extreme
downward (Defeat) position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob into the ignition switch
disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter; however, the
buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue
to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all Key Fobs.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Key Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
Key Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Remote Open Window Featuree
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the Key Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the
slot and gently pry open the access door.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
Battery Replacement
1— Battery Access Door
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a
range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
HAZARD switch off
•
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the Key Fob into the ignition
switch and turn the switch to the ON position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors,
pull the inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock
the rear doors, pull the door lock plunger on the door
trim panel upward.
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 — Unlock 2 — Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To prevent you from locking your Key Fob in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the
Key Fob is in the ignition and either front door is open. A
chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK
4. The driver’s door is opened
5. The doors were not previously unlocked
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled
2. The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
3. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK
4. The driver’s door is opened
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. The doors were not previously unlocked
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.
3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position. However, do not start the
engine.
4. Within 30 seconds, press the power door unlock
switch to unlock the doors.
5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the
system did not enter the programming mode and you
will need to repeat the procedure.
6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Child Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock plunger up to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position.
Child Lock Control
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Power Window Switches
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down
feature. Press the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Auto-Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
On some models, the driver’s and front passenger’s
power window switch has an Auto-up feature. Pull the
window switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
window path before closing the window. Such en-
trapment may result in serious injury.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
other doors. To disable the window controls, press and
release the window lockout button (setting it in the down
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position). To enable the window controls, press and
release the window lockout button again (setting it in the
up position).
Reset
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
following steps:
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or by activating the
power door lock switch located on either front door trim
panel.
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or
the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and
pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and
support the liftgate in the open position.
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Release
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes
could injure you and your passengers. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
that span the front, second, and third row seating for
the driver and passengers seated next to a window —
if equipped
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if
equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoul-
der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi-
tion the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
depress the button above the webbing to release the
anchorage, then move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a
deployed airbag, must be replaced immediately.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How the Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
2 — Seatback
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
NOTE:
•
If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•
For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha-
nism
AHR In Reset Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s (if equipped with belt
alert) seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of
starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert威) will alert the driver or front passenger to
buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s or passen-
ger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert, your
vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied. The
BeltAlert威 warning system is not activated when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. The BeltAlert威 warn-
ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is
folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, (do not
start the engine). Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
3. Unbuckle the driver’s seat belt, allow the seat belt to
retract, and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least
three times, ending with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re-
buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to completely
retract the seat belt each time.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this pro-
cedure.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or retracted.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air-
bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Driver Advanced Front Airbag
2 — Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
3 — Knee Bolsters
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB). If the vehicle is
equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
they are marked with an airbag label sewn into the
outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
•
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Steering Wheel and Column
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Airbag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB)
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
•
Supplemental Active Head Restraint for Driver and
Front Passenger
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the airbag to
inflate.
(Continued)
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) —
If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide en-
hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a
side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air-
bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out-
board side of the front seats.
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each airbag
Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain Location
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both
front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy
the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Airbags.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Airbag. An airbag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags
will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air-
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
bags — if equipped, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Airbags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners
— if equipped, as required, depending on the severity
and type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position,
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbag
system is not on and the airbags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to six seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the airbag system. The diagnostics
also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away by an authorized dealer.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags, it signals
the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Differ-
ent airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to
their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the
airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag Inflator
Units — If Equipped
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
collision.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side
airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The side
airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on the severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events. Additional sensors in the ORC determine the
level of airbag deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately four to six seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the ap-
proximate four to six-second interval.
•
The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of a collision, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
image the data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Infants and Child Restraints
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchor System (Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren)”.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)”.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
use.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
Release Loop
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Booster Seat
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat
cushion could cause serious injury.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH — Child Seat Anchor System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s second row passenger seats are equipped
with the child restraint anchor system called LATCH. The
LATCH system provides for the installation of the child
restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead
securing the child restraint using lower anchors and
upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-
able. However, because the lower anchors are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchors will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchors have been available
for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child re-
straint in any vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
All three second-row passenger seating positions have
lower anchors that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats. You should NEVER in-
stall LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats
in adjacent seating positions, or if your child restraints
are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts.
Latch Anchorages
1 — Outer 60% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops A and B. If placing a sec-
ond child seat in the vehicle, use the Outer 40% Seating Position and Lower Anchor
Loops D and E. DO NOT USE Middle 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchorage
Loops B and C.
2 — Middle 60% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops B and C. If placing a sec-
ond child seat in the vehicle, use the Outer 40% Seating Position and Lower Anchor
Loops D and E. DO NOT USE Outer 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops
A and B.
3 — Outer 40% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops D and E. If placing a sec-
ond child seat in the vehicle, use Outer 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor
Loops A and B or Middle 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops B and C.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
NOTE: When installing a child restraint, if it interferes
with the Head Restraint, recline the seatback slightly to
remove the interference.
The lower anchors are round bars located at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchors located behind
each rear seatback, near to the floor.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchor and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
Tether Strap Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchor and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchors. Next, attach
the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seatcover material. Then attach the tether strap to the
anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint, being careful to route the tether strap to
provide the most direct path between the anchor and the
child restraint, preferably between the head restraint
posts underneath the head restraint. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
children in the vehicle.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally, and pull it tight if necessary.
NOTE: When installing a child restraint, if it interferes
with the Head Restraint, recline the seatback slightly to
remove the interference.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
• Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
preferably between the head restraint posts underneath
the head restraint.
• If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchor.
• Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Tether Strap Mounting
Seat Track Release Lever
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
On seven passenger models, do not drive the
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped up-
ward and seat moved forward), as this position is
only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
(Continued)
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
On seven passenger models, do not allow a pas-
senger to sit in a third row seat with the second
row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the
passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make
sure that all windows are closed, and the blower switch
on the climate control is set at high speed. DO NOT use
the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for four to six
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, or if the
light stays on, flickers, or turns on while driving, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving.
Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check Turn Signal and High
Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 94
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 94
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 95
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 95
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped ........................... 96
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 96
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 97
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 97
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped ........... 98
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ............ 98
䡵 Seats ............................... 98
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments ........... 99
▫ Recliner Adjustment .................. 100
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped .......... 101
▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped .......................... 102
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped .......................... 102
3
▫ Power Seat — If Equipped .............. 104
▫ Adjusting Active Head Restraints ......... 105
▫ Second Row Passenger Seats ............ 108
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven
Passenger Models .................... 108
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 108
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats .... 109
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature —
Seven Passenger Models ............... 117
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 119
䡵 Lights ............................. 121
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 121
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights .......... 122
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 122
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 123
▫ Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...... 123
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer .............. 124
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 125
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 125
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 125
▫ Turn Signals ........................ 126
▫ Lane Change Assist ................... 127
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ............... 127
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 127
▫ Interior Lights ...................... 127
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Battery Saver Feature ................. 128
▫ Cargo Light ........................ 128
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 128
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 129
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 130
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 131
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 132
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 132
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped ............................ 133
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 134
▫ To Activate ......................... 134
▫ To Set a Desired Speed ................ 135
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 135
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 135
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 136
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 136
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped ............................ 137
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio ........... 138
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio ........... 138
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 139
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 139
▫ Sunglasses Storage ................... 140
▫ Interior Observation Mirror ............. 140
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped ...... 140
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 140
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 142
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 144
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 145
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button ............................ 145
▫ Security ........................... 145
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 146
▫ General Information .................. 146
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 147
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manually ........... 148
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ............ 148
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manually ............ 148
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 148
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ................. 148
▫ Pinch Protect Override ................ 149
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 149
▫ Sunshade Operation .................. 149
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 149
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 149
▫ Ignition Off Operation ................. 150
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed .................. 150
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 150
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 153
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 156
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Storage ............................. 158
▫ Instrument Panel Storage Compartment —
If Equipped ........................ 158
▫ Console Storage ..................... 158
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage
— If Equipped ...................... 160
▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
Storage Bin ......................... 161
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped ............... 161
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . 162
䡵 Chill Zone威 Beverage Cooler Storage
Compartment ......................... 163
▫ Chill Zone威 Beverage Cooler Operation .... 164
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 165
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped ..... 165
▫ Cargo Management System ............. 166
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 171
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 171
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 172
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ......... 173
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
forward, rearward and normal.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
Power Mirror Switches
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Select
3 — Left Mirror Select
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Models without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models with Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in
order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror
position following an adjustment.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command can be initiated by pressing the VR
button
located on the radio or steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ Phone
User Manual located on the DVD for further details.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in
the position desired. Using body pressure, move forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Recliner Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To
return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the
seatback is in the upright position.
Seatback Release
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seatback.
Turn the control lever downward to increase the lumbar
support or upward to decrease the lumbar support as
desired.
Lumbar Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The control lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the lever to
lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately
2.15 in (55 mm).
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a
hardback surface that you can use as a work surface
when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in
motion.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull upward on the lever to fold or unfold the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
Fold-Flat Seat
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Seat Switch
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting Active Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in
the event of a rear impact. The Active Head Restraint
should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is
located above the top of your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint (on some models, you may need to press the
push button). To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Adjusted Head Restraint Push Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
NOTE:
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things to Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury
or death in the event of a collision. The head
restraints should always be checked prior to oper-
ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Always adjust the head
restraints when the vehicle is in PARK.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of an accident and could result in serious injury or
death.
•
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se-
cured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Second Row Passenger Seats
These head restraints are non-adjustable and
non-removable.
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
These head restraints are non-adjustable and non-
removable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
Third-Row Passenger Seats with Fold-Flat Feature” for
further information.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of an accident.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The driver and front passenger seats are heated. The
heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and
seatback. The controls for each heater are located in the
switch bank in the center of the instrument panel.
After turning ON the ignition, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for high, one for low, and none for
off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically
switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator
light off after approximately 30 minutes of continuous
operation. It will turn the heater and the remaining
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of
continuous operation. If Low-level heating is selected,
the system automatically turns the heater and the indi-
cator light off after approximately 30 minutes of continu-
ous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for ex-
tended cargo space and still maintains some seating room
if needed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the seat to fold easily.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
On seven passenger models, do not allow a pas-
senger to sit in a third row seat with the second
row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the
passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured.
To Fold the Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects,
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
To Unfold the Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Forward and Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the position desired. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recliner Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seat, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.
Manual Seat Adjustment
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop upward to re-
lease the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest.
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not
in use or when additional seating area is required.
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be
certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move the Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
Latch Release-Loop
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward, and in one fluid motion, the seat
cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
tracks.
Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever
Tip n Slide Seat™
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi-
tion, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
To Unfold and Move the Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
1. Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
it locks in place.
2. Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
3. Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Grab Handle
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause
serious injury.
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats with
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row pas-
senger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if
needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seat,
make sure the second-row passenger seat is not in a
reclined position. This will allow the seat to fold easily.
To Fold the Seat
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seat forward slightly, and
release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the seat
forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as
the seat moves forward.
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
To Unfold the Seat
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
The seatback can also be locked in a reclined position. To
do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
release the release-loop.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of an accident.
(Continued)
Assist Strap
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
near the center of the grille between the grille and hood
opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right and then
raise the hood.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
Underhood Safety Latch
Hood Prop Rod
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
•
Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
•
Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signal lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and fog lights (if equipped). The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent for headlight operation.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the automatic mode.
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped
This feature is particularly useful when exiting your
vehicle in an unlit area. It provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after turning the
ignition switch to the LOCK position.
To activate the delay, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position while the headlights are still on. Then,
turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay
interval begins when you turn off the headlights. Only
the headlights will illuminate during this time.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
If you turn the headlights, or parking lights, or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Dimmer Control
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) and operate at DRL (lower) inten-
sity, whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running,
the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is off, the
turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in any position
except PARK.
NOTE: The DRL’s will turn off automatically when the
turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the
turn signal is not operating.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned to the LOCK position, a continuous chime will
sound to alert the driver when the driver’s door is
opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the
end of the multifunction lever.
Front Fog Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever upward or downward and
the corresponding turn signal indicator on the instru-
ment panel will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either turn signal indicator has a very fast
flash rate, check for an inoperative outside light bulb. If
an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, see
your authorized dealer for service.
Turn Signal Control
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds before
activating the flash-to-pass function again.
Interior Lights
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Models with Overhead Console
These lights are mounted in the overhead console be-
tween the sun visors. They are also located in the
headliner above the second row passenger seats. Press
and release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light
manually. These lights also turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, open a door or the liftgate, or turn the
Dimmer Control completely upward to the second de-
tent. For models equipped with LED lighting, you can
swivel the lens socket to direct the light as desired.
Models without Overhead Console
There are two courtesy/reading lights mounted in the
headliner between the sun visors. Press and release the
button next to the lens to turn the lights on or off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
manually. A courtesy light is also mounted in the head-
liner above the second row passenger seats. Press and
release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light
manually. These lights also turn on when you press the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, open a door or
the liftgate, or turn the dimmer control completely up-
ward to the second detent.
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically within 10 minutes of turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
Cargo Light
This light is mounted in the liftgate trim panel. It turns on
when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter, open a door or the liftgate, or turn the dimmer
control completely upward to the second detent.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Under-
standing the Features of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
•
In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
park position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the
park position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to the first detent, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every
second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles at vehicles speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h), or from a minimum of one cycle every second
Front Wiper Control
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h).
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Mist Feature
Push downward on the windshield wiper/washer con-
trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the
windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle.
The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Headlights With Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF
if they were turned ON by this feature.
The “Headlights with Wipers” feature can be turned on
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Mist Control
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end
of the speed control lever. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push and release the ON/OFF button a second time.
The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. Be sure to turn
the system off when it is not in use.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System will auto-
matically turn off when the engine is turned OFF.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press down-
ward on the lever to SET DECEL and release. Release the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) for the speed control to set.
•
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pressing the lever to SET
DECEL.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or pulling the speed control
lever toward you to CANCEL, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition OFF
erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
RESUME ACCEL and release and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase until the lever is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
reached, and the new set speed will be established.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed decreases.
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator pedal as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
Using Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever
is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Turning ParkView姞 On or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard key.
2. Select “system setup” soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” displayed across the top of
the screen.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears
again.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
an optional power sunroof switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Refer to “Lights/Courtesy/Reading Lights” in “Under-
standing the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, press on the raised
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console
and release and the door will swing downward.
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the
driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen-
ger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press on
the raised bars on the compartment door and release (the
door will swing downward), then raise the door until it is
almost closed and release. The door will latch in position
to use the interior observation mirror.
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Fea-
tures of Your Vehicle” for further information.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
HomeLink威 Buttons
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the handheld transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away from
the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and handheld transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
ming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Opening Sunroof — Manually
Press and hold the switch in the rearward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the rearward position, the sunroof will open
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manually
Press and hold the switch in the forward position.
Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position
desired and it will stop moving. If you continue to hold
the switch in the forward position, the sunroof will close
fully and then stop automatically. Release the switch once
the sunroof stops moving.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs, then press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent”. which operates regardless
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof in certain open or par-
tially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two fused 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets
located in the center console below the radio. The power
outlet on the top has power available when the ignition
switch in the ON or ACC position. The power outlet on
the bottom has power available when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK, ON, or ACC position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back
of the center console. This power outlet has power
available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON or
ACC position.
Front Power Outlets
1 — Switched Power
2 — Battery Power
Rear Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet
has power available when the ignition switch is in the
ON or ACC position.
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
•
The power outlet on the bottom of the center console
shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of
the console. The combined usage must not exceed 160
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
Rear Power Outlet
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150
Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of the
center console. This outlet can power cellular phones,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The control switch for the outlet is located in the switch
bank above the climate controls.
Power Inverter
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and release the switch once to turn on the power
outlet. A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in
approximately one second to indicate that power is
available at the outlet. Press and release the switch again
to turn off the power outlet. The status indicator will also
turn off.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Inverter Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
console, for the front passengers.
For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold-
ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.
Center Console Cupholders
Armrest Cupholders
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Quarter Trim Panel Cupholders (Seven Passenger
Models)
Door Bottle Holder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
STORAGE
Instrument Panel Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
Press and release the button on the door to open it. The
door swings upward to allow easy access to the compart-
ment.
Console Storage
Open storage areas, or cubby bins, are located in the floor
console and center console.
Instrument Panel Storage Compartment
Floor Console Cubby Bin
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There is additional storage under the center console
armrest. Pull upward on the release lever, located on the
front of the lid.
NOTE: The sliding armrest (if equipped) must be in the
rearward position to access the release button on the
front of the bin door.
Center Console Cubby Bin
Center Console Storage Bin
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then
forward to open the seat to the detent position.
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage
Bin
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.
Second-Row Map Pocket and Grocery Retainers
— If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located
on the back of the drivers seatback.
Armrest Cubby Bin
1 — Grocery Retainers
2 — Map Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
In-Floor Storage Bin with Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9 l) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35 l)
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if
equipped). Pull the door latch release-loop upward to
release the latch and then forward to open the bin door.
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on
the notches as shown.
In-Floor Storage Bin
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CHILL ZONE姞 BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE
COMPARTMENT
The Chill Zone威 Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment
can keep chilled beverages cool depending on ambient
temperature and climate control setting. Chill Zone威 is
intended for nonperishable beverages only.
The Chill Zone威 compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel above the glove compart-
ment. The beverage retainer inside the cooler is designed
to hold up to two 12 oz (0.35L) cans when placed
horizontally in the retainer. The beverage retainer is
removable to allow for storage of other items in the
compartment when not in use as a beverage cooler.
Removable Liner
Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Press and release the button on the door to open it. the
large door will swing upward to allow easy access to the
compartment contents.
Chill Zone姞 Beverage Cooler Operation
The blower speed setting on the climate control sets the
rate at which the air flows into the compartment. The
airflow control valve inside the compartment determines
how much air flows into the compartment. Turning the
valve rearward increases the airflow, while turning the
valve forward decreases the airflow. Turning the valve all
the way forward will turn off the airflow into the
compartment.
Airflow Control Valve
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The compartment cools when the airflow is open, the
engine is running and the Air Conditioning (A/C) is on
or the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system is
set for automatic operation (if equipped). This allows you
to cool the compartment when the climate control is in
the cooling or heating mode.
NOTE: Whether operating a Manual Heating and A/C
system or operating an ATC system in the manual mode,
the A/C indicator must be ON to cool the compartment.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging
station in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it,
press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and
release.
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
Rechargeable Flashlight
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Cargo Management System
Five Passenger System Features
•
A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
•
A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
•
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in “Understanding the Features of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
•
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding the Features of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•
Cargo tie-downs.
•
A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
Seven Passenger System Features
•
A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
seats.
•
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in “Understanding the Features of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
•
50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in “Understanding the Features of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
•
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding the Features of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•
Cargo tie-downs.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo Tie-Downs
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
Passenger Models
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-
ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in
the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into
the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in an accident. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount-
ing. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the “On” position will
activate the rear wiper.
Rotate the switch upward to the “washer” position
will activate that rear washer. The washer pump
will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring
is engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three
times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
CAUTION!
•
Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on
position.
•
In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, dam-
age to the rear wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the
cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
To Move the Cross Rails
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxi-
mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
side rail.
2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stan-
chions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on the
outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning.
There are four frontward marks for the front cross rail
and four rearward marks for the rear cross rail. Make
sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or parallel at
any position for proper function.
3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in
position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the clamp
tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
•
To help control wind noise when installing the cross
rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle.
Roof Luggage Rack
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in
the fourth position from the front and the rear cross
rail in the eighth position.
The tie down holes on the cross rail ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
•
Cross rails should remain equally spaced or paral-
lel at any luggage rack position for proper func-
tion. Noncompliance could result in damage to the
roof rack, cargo, and vehicle.
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
•
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
loads. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 181
䡵 Instrument Cluster .................... 182
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 183
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped ............................ 198
▫ CMTC Reset Buttons .................. 198
▫ Compass/Temperature Display .......... 200
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped ................... 202
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 204
▫ Oil Change Required .................. 205
▫ Trip Functions ...................... 206
▫ Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode)
— If Equipped ...................... 208
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 210
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 214
4
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 214
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 222
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 224
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) .................... 227
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ............................. 227
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)....... 230
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 230
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 233
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 235
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 238
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio ...................... 239
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 239
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 245
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 247
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 250
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 250
䡵 Media Center 830N (REU) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD/HDD/NAV
Changer — If Equipped.................. 251
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite Radio) ............. 252
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions —
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 252
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ............... 252
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
Radios Only) ......................... 256
▫ System Activation .................... 256
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 256
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite)
Mode ............................. 257
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 257
▫ Reception Quality .................... 257
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ............. 258
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 261
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) ....................... 261
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Sirius Backseat TV™) — If Equipped ........ 261
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ —
If Equipped .......................... 261
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 0.5 —
If Equipped .......................... 263
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Device ........... 263
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using
Radio Buttons ....................... 263
▫ Play Mode ......................... 264
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................. 265
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 267
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions ............ 267
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation .......................... 268
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e.,
CD) Operation ...................... 268
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 268
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 269
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 269
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System ............................ 270
▫ Three-Zone Manual Air Conditioning And
Heating Systems — If Equipped .......... 274
▫ Two- And Three-Zone Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Systems — If
Equipped .......................... 277
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 286
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Window Demist Outlet 5 — Hazard Switch 9 — Climate Control
2 — Air Outlet 6 — Switch Bank 10 — Radio
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Beverage Cooler/Storage Compartment* 11 — Ignition Switch
4 — Storage Compartment or Remote Display
Panel*
8 — Glove Box * If Equipped
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates
that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, in
heavy traffic, or when towing a trailer. If the pointer rises
to the “H” mark, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If
the Air Conditioning A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the needle remains on the “H” mark, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
NOTE: The gauge pointer will remain near its last
reading when the engine is turned off. It will return to a
true reading when the engine is restarted.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running, as you would not be able to react to the
temperature indicator light if the engine overheats.
2. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when
ignition switch is in the ON position.
3. Fuel Cap Indicator
This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle
where the fuel filler cap is located.
4. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches
⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature
gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this case, the indicator light will
flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound,
until the engine is allowed to cool.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the en-
gine OFF immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the fog lights
are on.
6. Low Fuel Warning Light
This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to
approximately one-eighth tank.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the
corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when
the turn signal switch is operated.
NOTE:
•
A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than
1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
8. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the high beam headlights are
on. Pull the multifunction lever on the left side of
the steering column toward you to switch to low beam.
9. Speedometer
Shows the vehicle speed.
10. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
16 seconds when the vehicle Security system is
arming and then flash slowly when the system
is armed. The light will also turn on for about
three seconds when the ignition switch is first turned
ON.
11. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Failure Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light monitors the All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) system. The light will turn on for a bulb
check when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for as long as
three seconds.
When lit solid: There is an AWD system fault. AWD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the AWD
system soon.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
When blinking: The AWD system is temporarily dis-
abled due to overload condition.
12. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
13. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
14. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for several seconds after the
ignition switch is turned ON as a reminder to
“buckle up.” This light will remain on as long as
the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer button” for additional
information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans-
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ................... Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-on .................Fuel Saver Indicator On
door .............................Door Ajar
gATE ...........................Liftgate Ajar
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ............... OilChange Required
LoCOOL ........................ LowCoolant
LoWASH .................... LowWasher Fluid
ESPOFF ......................ESPDeactivated
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then most warnings will display in the EVIC. For further
information refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
ECO / ECO-on (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-on indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-on
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
gASCAP Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer display
area. If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
“clicking” sound is heard. Then press the TRIP ODOM-
ETER button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate tire pressure is low, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHAngE OIL Message (Base And Mid Line Clusters
Only)
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
the scheduled maintenance) perform the following pro-
cedure:
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
16. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If the light turns on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see your authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not turn on during starting.
17. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
will turn on and remain on when the ignition
switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the
ON position. The light will turn off after the engine is
started.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
If the light does not turn on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light turns on and remains on while driving, safely
bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine. DO
NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS
CORRECTED. This light does not show the quantity of
oil in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
using the proper procedure.
18. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
such as the fog lights or rear defroster. If the light remains
on, it means that the charging system is experiencing a
problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain
service immediately.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
19. Cruise Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator lights when the electronic speed
control system is turned on.
20. Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button
— If Equipped
Changing the Display
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings or the ECO display.
The letter “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles (km). The
odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Resetting the Trip Odometer
Display the trip mileage that you want to reset, “Trip A”
or “Trip B.” Then push and hold the button (approxi-
mately two seconds) until the display resets to 0. The
odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom-
eter.
21. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale light illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale light after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. (Refer to
“Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires — General
Information” and to “Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information).
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
brakes. Furthermore, the ABS light should be checked
frequently to assure that it is operating properly. If the
light does not turn on, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
23. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
25. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in acci-
dent.
26. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
27. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to six seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
28. Compass/Temperature Display Button — If
Equipped
Operates the Compass/Temperature display in the Com-
pass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) display.
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Compass Mini–Trip Computer (CMTC) Display
— If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster, this
display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist.
Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for
further information.
On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster, this
display shows the compass heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW,
SE, and SW) and the outside temperature. The
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button operates
this display. Press and release the button once to turn on
the display. Press and release it again to turn off the
display. Refer to Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
•
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi-
nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler 威 gps
(Navigation Radio), the NAV system will provide the
compass direction, and the variance and calibration
menus will be unavailable. The compass will perform
accurately, based on GPS signals instead of the Earth’s
magnetic field.
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer is located in the
instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive dis-
play (displays information on outside temperature, com-
pass direction, and trip information).
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
CMTC Reset Buttons
CMTC Reset Button
Press the left reset button located on the instrument
cluster to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Functions:
AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the reset button for
approximately two seconds.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display:
NE ....... Eight-point compass headings are displayed
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F............ Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AV G .......AverageFuel Economy (English or Metric)
DTE .......................Distance to Empty
ET ............................ Elapsed Time
CMTC Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) — If Equipped
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button on the instrument
cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B, or to
ECO. Press and hold the right button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE:
•
A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
•
Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell
phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located
and such devices may interfere and cause false com-
pass readings.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC
Compass Variance Map
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program-
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approxi-
mately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone num-
ber is displayed.
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
instrument cluster below the fuel and temperature
gauges. Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted
buttons are also equipped with the EVIC. The EVIC
consists of the following:
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
System status, including vehicle information warning
message displays, and Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) displays (if equipped)
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release this button and the mode
displayed will change between Compass/
Outside Temperature, Trip Functions, System
Status, and Personal Settings.
Press this button to reset Trip Functions and
change Personal Settings.
Press this button to scroll through Trip Func-
tions (Average Fuel Economy, Distance To
Empty [DTE], Elapsed Time, Units In), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features).
Press this button to display the Compass/
Outside Temperature.
EVIC Steering Wheel Switches
MENU
Button
RESET
Button
SCROLL
Button
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE
Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
•
Channel # Transmit. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Channel # Training. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Channel # Trained. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Clearing Channels. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Channels Cleared. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Did Not Train. Refer to “Garage Door Opener” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•
Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”.
•
Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”.
•
Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”.
•
Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting
And Operating”.
•
Low Fuel
•
Cal
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
•
Low Washer Fluid
•
Coolant Low
•
Key in Ignition
•
Lights On
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty
•
Elapsed Time
•
Units In
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion.
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
•
Units In
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “U.S.” or “METRIC”
appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
Equipped
Press and release this button to display
one of eight compass readings and the
outside temperature. The compass
readings indicate the direction the ve-
hicle is facing.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside tem-
perature in the EVIC display. This message will appear
whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the ve-
hicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated.
You may calibrate the compass by slowly completing one
or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
COMPASS/
TEMPERATURE
Button
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or is inaccurate, you can
calibrate the compass manually by performing the fol-
lowing steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “CALIBRATE COM-
PASS” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-
bration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC.
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. To allow the compass
module to compensate for that difference and ensure
accuracy, you can set the variance in the compass module
to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the
Compass Variance Map. To set the variance, perform the
following steps.
NOTE:
•
The default variance setting is Zone 8. When setting
the variance, the numbering will wrap around from
Zone 15 to Zone 1.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
•
Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the instrument panel, as this is where the compass
sensor is located.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
Settings displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “COMPASS VARI-
ANCE” message and the last variance zone number
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release RESET button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS/TEMPERATURE
button to exit.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transaxle is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
Compass Variance Map
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the RESET button while in this display to select English,
French, or Spanish. Then, as you continue, the informa-
tion will display in the selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lan-
guage selection.
“Auto UNLK On Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors and the liftgate will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transaxle is in
the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“RKE Unlock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger doors and liftgate.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all doors and the
liftgate will unlock on the first press of the RKE UN-
LOCK button. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All
Doors 1st Press” appears.
“Sound Horn With Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be
selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock
feature. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
“Flash Lamp With Lock”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Headlamp Off Delay”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
after turning the ignition to the LOCK position. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
“0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Headlamps With Wipers” (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the multifunction lever is
placed in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
ON. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Key-Off Power Delay”
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ Phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and ignition powered outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“ILLUMIN Approach”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and hold the RESET button until “Off,”
“30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Display ECO — If Equipped
The “ECO” message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Display Units In”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “ENGLISH” or “MET-
RIC” appears.
“NAV Turn By Turn” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the RESET button until “ON”
or “OFF” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Variance” under “Compass Display.”
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration” under “Com-
pass Display.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
REQ Radio
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type
or undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
requency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
For Uconnect™ “Voice Command,” refer to “Uconnect™
Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES Radio
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type
or undefined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
MEDIA CENTER 830N (REU) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD/HDD/NAV CHANGER
— IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REU Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, six disc CD/
DVD player, USB port, 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD),
and the uconnect™ phone cellular system.
A 7 in (17.8 cm) remote screen allows easy menu selec-
tion, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertain-
ment, and hands-free mobile phone use.
The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-
Positioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
a remote color screen to provide maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
and other radio features allows uploads of music and
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System
(VES)™, separate audio outputs allow passengers to
listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks
play through the system’s wireless headphones. This
means rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the
optional rear-seat entertainment system while the driver
and front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include music type selections,
traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets, parental
lockout for VES™ (if equipped), and a backup camera
display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera.
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing the Time Zone
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three sec-
onds.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
4. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to
“Time Zone,” and then press and release the joystick.
5. If the desired time zone setting has a check mark next
to it, proceed to the next step. Otherwise, turn the knob
surrounding the joystick to select the desired time zone
setting, and then press and release the joystick. A check
mark will display next to the selection.
6. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When On is selected, this feature will display the time of
day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to
change the current setting:
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three sec-
onds.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
4. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to
“Daylight Savings,” and then press and release the
joystick.
5. If the desired setting has a check mark next to it,
proceed to the next step. Otherwise, turn the knob
surrounding the joystick to select “Off” or “On,” and
then press and release the joystick. A check mark will
display next to the selection.
6. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three sec-
onds.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
4. If “User Time” has a check mark next to it, proceed to
the next step. Otherwise, turn the knob surrounding the
joystick to scroll to “User Time,” and then press and
release the joystick.
5. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Set
Hours,” and then press and release the joystick.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the hour
highlighted on the clock on the screen. Press and release
the joystick when done.
7. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Set
Minutes,” and then press and release the joystick.
8. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the
minutes highlighted on the clock on the screen. Press and
release the joystick when done.
9. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the screen when the system is turned off. Proceed as
follows to change the current setting:
NOTE: You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and
holding the “TIME” button on the radio for three sec-
onds.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Press and release the “SETUP” button on the radio.
3. If “Time Setup” is highlighted on the menu, press and
release the joystick in the center of the radio. Otherwise,
turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select “Time
Setup,” and then press and release the joystick.
4. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to
“Clock if Radio off,” and then press and release the
joystick to change the current setting. A check mark will
display next to “Clock if Radio off” when the feature is
selected.
5. Press and release the “SETUP” button to exit the
screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™)
— IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-
seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-
tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii or
Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
Navigation, RBZ Multimedia or REN Multimedia User
Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ in-
cludes the following components for rear seat entertain-
ment:
•
A diagonal 8 in (20 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center overhead console.
The screen features brightness control for optimum
daytime and nighttime viewing.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
•
The LCD Screen swings down from the console to
allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
•
The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
•
A battery-powered infrared remote control that snaps
into a molded compartment in the center console.
•
Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE:
Refer to your “Video Entertainment System
(VES)™ User Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
VES™ with Rear HVAC Controls
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) 0.5 —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES/REL and
REQ/RET radios only with uconnect威. For sales code
RBZ/REN/REZ touch screen radio and REU/REX/RE1
radio, refer to the separate User’s Manual.
This feature allows an iPod威 mobile digital device to be
plugged into the vehicle’s sound system through a con-
nector (UCI connector) using an optional connection
cable (available through MOPAR威). See your authorized
dealer for details.
Using this feature,
•
the iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Al-
bum, etc.) information display on radio.
•
the iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
Connecting The iPod姞 Device
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove
box or center console on some vehicles. This location may
vary with vehicle). Once the iPod威 is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle system (this may take a few
seconds to connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on
the iPod威 display, and it starts charging and is ready for
use by pressing radio switches as described below.
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, the iPod威 audio track (if
available from iPod威) will start playing over the vehicle
audio system.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
data:
Tune/Scroll Knob
Use the Tune/Scroll knob to go to the next or previous
track.
The Tune/Scroll knob functions similar to the scroll
wheel on the iPod威 mobile digital device.
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing
a track skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click
during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
RW (Rewind) Button
Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the
current track. Holding the RW button long enough will
jump back to the beginning of the current track.
Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five
seconds of the current track.
FF (Fast Forward) Button
Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the
current track.
Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five
seconds of the current track.
SEEK Buttons
Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next
track.
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first two
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
previous track in the list; pressing this button at any other
time in the current track it will go back to the beginning
of the track.
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
will go to the next track in the list.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the
information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press of the INFO button will go to the next
screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been
viewed, the last press of the INFO button will go back to
the Play mode screen on the radio.
REPEAT Button
Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing
track.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds
of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, press the SCAN button again.
During the SCAN mode, pressing the SEEK button to the
left or right will go to the previous or next tracks.
RND (Random) Button (RES/REL Radios Only)
Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle
on and shuffle off modes of the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on.
List or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
iPod威.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Tune/Scroll Knob
In the List mode, the Tune/Scroll knob functions in a
similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
Turning the Tune/Scroll knob clockwise (forward) and
counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through lists, dis-
playing the track detail on the radio display. Once the
track to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the Tune/Scroll knob to select and start playing the
track. By turning the Tune/Scroll knob fast, the device
will jump through the list faster. During fast scroll, a
slight delay in updating the information on the radio
display may be noticed.
During all List modes, the iPod威 will display all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track to be selected is at
the bottom of the list, just turn the Tune/Scroll knob
backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
Radio Preset Buttons
In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 device.
•
1 – Playlists
•
2 – Artists
•
3 – Albums
•
4 – Genres
•
5 – Audiobooks
•
6 – Podcasts
After pressing a preset button, the list selected is on the
top line and the first item in that list on the second line.
To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button
Pressing the LIST button will take the iPod威 to the top
level menu. Turn the Tune/Scroll knob to list the top
menu item to be selected and then press the Tune/Scroll
knob. This will take jump to the next sub menu list item
of the iPod威 and follow the same steps to go to the
desired track in that list. Not all iPod威 sub menu levels
are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE Button
The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
the genre listing on your iPod威.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering
wheel to access the switches.
Right-Hand Switch Functions
•
Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation
•
Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
•
Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
•
Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions for Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
•
Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
•
Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one
second after the current track begins to play.
•
Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
and so forth.
•
Press the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located in the
center stack of the instrument panel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Single-Zone Manual Climate Control
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control
Mode control allows you to choose
from several selections of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIR-
CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times
and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode
is not allowed.
•
Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA-
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULA-
TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push on this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A light will illu-
minate when the A/C System is en-
gaged.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-
TION mode buttons at the same time.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Three-Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating
Systems — If Equipped
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat-
ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
Three-Zone Manual Climate Control
1 — Left Temperature 7 — Right Temperature
2 — PANEL 8 — Rear DEFROST
3 — BI-LEVEL 9 — RECIRCULATION
4 — Front Blower 10 — Front DEFROST
5 — FLOOR 11 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 — MIX
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel controls
rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations.
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
Rear Manual Climate Control (Overhead)
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel has
five positions; off, rear, and a range of blower speeds.
Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in
the rear (RR) position do the second row seat occupants
have control of the rear blower speed.
Three-Zone Manual Lower Climate Control (Rear - Zone
Instrument Panel Control)
1 — RR Rear Control ON 3 — Rear Blower Speed
2 — Rear Blower OFF 4 — Rear Temperature
Rear Manual Climate Control (Overhead)
1 — Rear Blower 3 — Rear Climate Control Lock
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear MODE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
RR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
When the blower knob on the Three-Zone Manual lower
Climate Control (Instrument Panel control) is set to any
position other than the RR, settings will be controlled by
the Instrument Panel lower control.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
tion. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front
control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow
will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Two- and Three-Zone Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Systems — If Equipped
•
Front Two-and Three-Zone ATC allows both driver
and front passenger seat occupant, and rear seat
occupants to select individual comfort settings.
•
Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation
by a button press on the right rotary knob and a
comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the
control unit.
•
The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
•
SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting for the cabin, if desired.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
The Two- and Three-Zone ATC System automatically
maintain the interior comfort level desired by the driver
and all passengers. The system automatically adjusts the
air temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside
air recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains
a comfortable temperature, even under changing condi-
tions.
Two-Zone ATC
1 — System On/Off 7 — Front MODE
2 — Left Front Temperature 8 — Electric Rear Window De-
froster Button
3 — Display Screen 9 — Front DEFROST
4 — Right Front Temperature 10 — Front Blower Speed
5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
On/Off
11 — AUTO Mode / Blower
6 — RECIRCULATE
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Three-Zone ATC
1 — System On/Off 7 — Front MODE
2 — Left Front Temperature 8 — RECIRCULATE
3 — Display Screen 9 — Front DEFROST
4 — Right Front Temperature 10 — Front Blower Speed
5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
On/Off
11 — SYNC
6 — AUTO Mode / Blower
Three-Zone ATC Lower Control Panel
1 — Rear Blower Speed 4 — Rear ATC Lock
2 — Rear Temperature / Rear
System On/Off
5 — Rear DEFROST
3 — Rear MODE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel
and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with three temperatures for driver, front
passenger, and rear seats. The system will then automati-
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passen-
ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front
ATC display, until the engine warms up. The fan will
engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected, or
by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati-
cally.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
button. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected. This allows the front
occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfort-
able, while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
The SNOWFLAKE button, or A/C button, allows
the operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE
mode, and the ATC display is on cool, dehumidified air
flows through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode is
desired, press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the
SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display, and deactivate
the A/C system.
NOTE:
•
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the SNOW-
FLAKE can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control
button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate in
the display when this button is selected. Push the button
a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode
LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE-
CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op-
eration. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
these modes are selected.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of
the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The Three-Zone ATC Climate control for the Rear ATC
System is on the front lower ATC panel located on the
instrument panel.
Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC
System from the Three-Zone ATC Climate control, illu-
minates a LOCK symbol in the rear display. The rear
temperature and air source are controlled from the Three-
Zone ATC Climate control.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
The Three-Zone ATC Climate control is located in the
headliner, near the center of the vehicle.
The Rear-Zone ATC for the rear passengers is in the
overhead console above the second row passenger seats.
1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC
panel. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear
temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
Rear-Zone ATC
1 — AUTO 4 — Rear MODE
2 — Blower Speed 5 — REAR LOCK
3 — Rear Temperature
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the passenger side trim panel behind the third row
seats. The heater outlets are located in the passenger
side trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not
block or place objects directly in front of the inlet
grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the
front upper ATC panel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. Refer to “Cooling System”
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
under “Maintenance Procedures” and to “Fluids, Lubri-
cants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for information pertaining to the cooling system and
coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel
and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service
intervals.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 295
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 295
▫ Normal Starting (Tip Start) ............. 296
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) ............................ 296
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 296
▫ After Starting ....................... 297
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 297
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 298
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 300
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 300
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ............................ 301
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission ....................... 301
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 301
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 305
▫ Operation ......................... 305
▫ General Information .................. 306
5
䡵 All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped ...... 307
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 307
▫ Acceleration ........................ 307
▫ Traction ........................... 308
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 308
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 309
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 311
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 312
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 312
䡵 Brake System ........................ 315
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 316
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System ........... 317
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 317
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 319
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 320
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ......... 320
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ........ 321
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light ...................... 324
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............. 324
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 325
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 325
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 330
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 331
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 335
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 335
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 336
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ..................... 338
▫ Compact Spare Tire ................... 338
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 339
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 340
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 341
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 341
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 343
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 343
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 343
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 344
▫ Base System ........................ 347
▫ Premium System – If Equipped .......... 349
▫ General Information .................. 352
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 353
▫ 2.4L Engine ........................ 353
▫ 3.5L Engine ........................ 353
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 354
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 354
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 355
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 355
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 355
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 356
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 357
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 357
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 359
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 359
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 359
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ...... 360
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ........ 360
▫ Overloading ........................ 360
▫ Loading ........................... 361
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 361
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 361
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 366
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ..................... 367
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 369
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 370
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 375
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 377
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ........................... 377
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key fob in
the ignition switch. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Normal Starting (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
onds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte-
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the
key fob from the ignition switch, and apply the
parking brake. Once the key fob is removed from
the ignition switch, the shift lever is locked in the
PARK position, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave unattended children inside a vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position. The
key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the
shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
BTSI Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To activate
the override system, perform the following steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and rotate it
to the ON position.
3. Remove the cubby bin liner located in the center
console behind the shift lever.
4. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole
at the front of the cubby bin and push the manual
override release lever forward.
5. While holding the release lever forward, move the
shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL.
6. Release the manual override.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key fob from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting
out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the brake pedal is applied.
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never leave children in the vehicle alone. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. The child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. They could operate the
windows, other vehicle controls or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as
this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE — Six-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick威
mode and select the “5” range when frequent transmis-
sion shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds or while towing heavy trailers). Under these
conditions, using the “5” range will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build-up.
“D” (Overdrive) — Four-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” range
when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
the “D” (Overdrive) range, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly
terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while towing
heavy trailers). Under these conditions, using the “3”
range will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
“3” (Drive) — Four-Speed Transmission
This range eliminates shifts into “D” (Overdrive). The
transmission will operate normally in first, second, and
third gear while in this range. The “3” (Drive) range
should also be used when descending steep grades to
prevent brake system distress.
NOTE: Using the “3” (Drive) range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up.
“L” (Low) — Four-Speed Transmission
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds
acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
“D” (Overdrive) and “5” range (for six-speed
AutoStick威 transmission) and “3” range (for four-
speed auto transmission) by changing shift points.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into sec-
ond gear (third gear for six-speed). The transmission
remains in second gear (third gear for six-speed) despite
the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEU-
TRAL will continue to operate. This Reset feature allows
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
4. Restart the engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more
control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa-
tions.
Operation
By placing the shift lever one shift-level below the DRIVE
position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows
the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.
Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will
display in the instrument cluster on the transmission
range indicator.
NOTE: In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to
the right (+) or left (-). AutoStick威 is deactivated when the
shift lever is moved out of the AutoStick威 (+/-) position.
General Information
•
You can launch the vehicle from a stop in any gear
except top gear. The system will ignore attempts to
upshift into top gear at too low of a vehicle speed.
(sixth for six-speed, fourth for four-speed).
•
If a ratio other than first is selected, and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
automatically select the first gear ratio.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snow or icy
conditions.
•
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en-
gaged.
•
The transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick威 is
engaged.
•
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
•
If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transmission will automatically select
the next higher ratio.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
•
Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually
selected ratio, however:
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
−
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
CAUTION!
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid
type.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
•
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot rest-
ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
•
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to con-
trol. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” under “Elec-
tronic Brake Control System” in this section for more
information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS
cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slip-
pery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and Electronic Stability
Program (ESP). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations, and
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
•
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immedi-
ate repair to the ABS system is required.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESP (Electronic Stability
Program)” in this section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the road-
way, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
•
Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities
of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP Operating Modes
The ESP system has two available operating modes.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESP
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional informa-
tion.
Partial Off
The ESP OFF button is located in the switch bank above
the climate Control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESP on again,
momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESP On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF
button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the
ESP OFF button. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
ESP OFF Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com-
bined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP/TCS
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both
turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. They should both turn off with the engine
running. If the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light
turns on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS
system, or both. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
⬙The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Mal-
function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will flash,
the engine power will be reduced, and you will feel the
brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
•
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Ve-
hicle Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
•
If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
•
Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
TIRE SIZING TERMS
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult over-heating and in tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Prolonged use of limited use spare, or an incorrect
tire size on either front wheel, may damage transmis-
sion differential and result in loss of vehicle mobil-
ity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
Tire Rotation
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will still be
on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale light.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will
turn on upon the next ignition switch cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Telltale light will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Three Trigger modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Telltale light will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
3.5L Engine
The 3.5L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit
over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
methanol.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use
with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door rein-
forcement.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
•
Failure to follow this warning may result in seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control – Electronic
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
reational vehicle dealer for additional
information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com
-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
2.4L/Automatic 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
which includes up to
5 persons & Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.5L/Automatic
(without Trailer Tow
Prep Package
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
200 lbs (91 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
150 lbs (68 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
which includes 5 to 7
persons & Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg) *Ex
-
cept for AWD mod-
els.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com
-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.5L/Automatic
(with Trailer Tow
Prep Package
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg) 40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
350 lbs (159 kg)
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg) 40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
300 lbs (136 kg)
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg) 40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
2,500 lbs (1 134 kg)
which includes 5 to 6
persons & Luggage
250 lbs (113 kg) *Ex
-
cept for AWD mod-
els.
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg) 40 sq ft (3.7 sq m)
2,500 lbs (1 134 kg)
which includes 7
persons & Luggage
100 lbs (113 kg) *Ex
-
cept for AWD mod-
els.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
•
* For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
WARNING! (Continued)
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
the “3” range for four-speed automatic or the “5” range
for six-speed automatic.
NOTE: Using the “3” or “5” range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
utes of continuous operation, then change the transmis-
sion fluid and filter according to the interval specified for
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
“police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
NOTE: Check the four-speed transmission fluid level
before towing. The six-speed transmission is sealed and
the fluid level cannot be checked. See your authorized
dealer for assistance.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
AutoStick威 – If Equipped
−
By using the AutoStick威 modes and selecting a specific
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
highest gear range should be selected that allows for
adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
−
Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On
The Ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 380
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 380
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 381
▫ Jack Location ....................... 382
▫ Spare Tire Location ................... 383
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 383
▫ Spare Tire Removal ................... 383
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ................... 385
▫ Jacking Instructions ................... 387
䡵 Jump-Starting ........................ 392
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 393
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 395
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 396
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 398
▫ Without The Ignition Key .............. 398
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition
And All Four Wheels On The Ground) ..... 398
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly .................... 400
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put the transaxle in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the en-
gine OFF immediately, and call for service.
380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
•
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
Jack Storage Location
382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible, avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK.
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On Seven-Passenger Models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-
handle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is
on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to
pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the
winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
remove it from the center of the wheel.
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2, and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
Spare Tire Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-
handle assembly counterclockwise until there is enough
cable slack to allow you to pull the cable and retainer out
from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the
winch.
3. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground and
the valve stem is at the top of the wheel and facing away
from the rear of the vehicle.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
5. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to raise
the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to rotate the
jack-handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha-
nism click three times. It cannot be over tightened. Push
against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely
in place.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
Spare Tire Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
Jack Warning Label
388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire just
clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, the wheel cover is
held on the wheel by the wheel nuts. When reinstalling
the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the
valve stem, place the wheel cover onto the wheel, and
then install the wheel nuts.
6. Install the spare tire.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
•
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in “Start-
ing and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury or death.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise with the jack handle.
9. Finish tightening the wheel nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
wheel nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location.
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced as soon
as possible.
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the as-
sembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the
jack-handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tightened.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
Wheel Nuts
Tighten all wheel nuts occasionally to eliminate the
possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes
in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially
important during the first few hundred miles (kilome-
ters) of operation and after changing a tire. This allows
the wheel nuts to seat properly. All wheel nuts should
first be firmly seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the wheel nuts to the final torque in increments.
Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the nut oppo-
site of the one you previously tightened until the final
torque is achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs
(130 N·m).
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Locking Tab
394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and 1st gear. Using the least accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin-
ning the wheels is most effective.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)” in “Starting and Operating”
for further information.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is
the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed
towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used. Furthermore, rear towing is not
recommended with the front wheels on the ground, as
transaxle damage can result. If rear towing is the only
alternative, a front end dolly must be used. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case and/or
transmission. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With The Key In The Ignition And All Four
Wheels On The Ground)
CAUTION!
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC position.
(Continued)
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
axle may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains
in NEUTRAL.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(25 km).
•
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle
failure. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If the transaxle is not
operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than
15 miles (25 km), the vehicle must be transported
either with a flatbed truck or with the front wheels
off the ground.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(25 km).
•
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h),
and both front and rear wheels must be on the ground.
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle
failure. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If the transaxle is not
operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than
15 miles (25 km), the vehicle must be transported on
a flatbed truck.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels
on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear
towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be
used. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case and/or
transmission. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............. 403
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L ............. 404
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 405
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 405
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 406
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 407
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 407
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 408
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 409
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 412
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 412
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 413
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 414
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped ............ 416
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 417
▫ Wiper Blades ....................... 418
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 420
7
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 421
▫ Cooling System ..................... 424
▫ Brake System ....................... 430
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 432
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 435
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders .............. 440
䡵 Fuses .............................. 440
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module ......... 440
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 448
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 449
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 450
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp,
Side Marker Lamp ................... 450
▫ Front Fog Lamp ..................... 451
▫ Tail/Stop Lamp, Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Tail
Lamp, Backup Lamp .................. 452
▫ License Plate Lamp ................... 454
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 455
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 456
▫ Engine ............................ 456
▫ Chassis ........................... 457
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.5L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 — Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 10 — Engine Oil Fill
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of this vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if this vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether the vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range mark-
ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding
1.0 qt (1.0 l) of oil when the reading is at the low end of
the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 2.4L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
the engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com-
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) – 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-
neered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble do
not need to be removed to access the compartment.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine com-
partment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Pro-
cedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace the
filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward
until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument
panel.
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
Glove Box Removal
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to install
the filter properly will result in the need to replace it
more often.
7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the hinges
are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the door
latch will not align properly.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
A/C Air Filter Replacement
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
2.4L Engine – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.
3.5L Engine – the level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and
“FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be pro-
tected against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
Fluid Level Check – 2.4L Engine
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which is
the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
•
Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replen-
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
Fluid Level Check – 3.5L Engine
The automatic transmission has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis-
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and cargo area be kept
clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with an electric defroster. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly.
This center contains fuses and relays.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the power module cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the TIPM, and possibly
result in an electrical system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J1 40 Amp
Green
—
Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp
Pink
—
Transfer Case Module
– If Equipped
J3 30 Amp
Pink
—
Rear Door Module
J4 25 Amp
Natural
—
Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp
Natural
—
Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp
Green
—
Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) Pump/
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J7 30 Amp
Pink
—
Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) Valve/
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
J8 40 Amp
Green
—
Power Memory Seat –
If Equipped
J9 40 Amp
Green
—
Flex Fuel/PZEV Mo-
tor – If Equipped
J10 30 Amp
Pink
—
(If Equipped) Head-
lamp Washer Relay-
(BUX), Manifold Tun-
ing Valve
J11 30 Amp
Pink
—
(If Equipped) Sway
Bar/Thatchum Secu-
rity (BUX)/Power
Sliding Door
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
—
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Main
J14 40 Amp
Green
—
Electric Back Light
(EBL)
J15 30 Amp
Pink
—
Rear Blower – If
Equipped
J17 40 Amp
Green
—
Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Blue —
NGC (Powertrain
Control Module)/
Transmission Range
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
—
Radiator Fan Motor
J20 30 Amp
Pink
—
Front Windshield
Wiper Hi/Low
J21 20 Amp
Blue
—
Front/Rear Washer
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J22 25 Amp
Natural
—
Sunroof Module – If
Equipped
M1
—
15 Amp
Blue
Center High Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)
M2
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Lights – If
Equipped
M3
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Front/Rear Axle,
AWD Mod
M4
—
10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
M5
—
25 Amp
Natural
Power Inverter – If
Equipped
M6
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #1/
Accessory (ACC) Rain
Sensor
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M7
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #2 (Bat-
tery or Accessory
(ACC) Selectable)
M8
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seats –
If Equipped
M9
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M10
—
15 Amp
Blue
Vanity Lamps/
Hands-Free Module
(HFM) – If Equipped,
Remote Display – If
Equipped, Satellite
Digital Audio Re-
ceiver (SDARS) – If
Equipped, Universal
Garage Door Opener
(UGDO) – If
Equipped, Vanity
Light, Video Enter-
tainment System
(VES)™ – If Equipped
M11
—
10 Amp
Red
Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) –
If Equipped, Under-
hood Light
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M12
—
30 Amp
Green
Radio, Amplifier
(AMP)
M13
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN), Multi-
function Switch/Siren
Module, ITM
M14
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow (BUX) – If
Equipped
M15
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Dim Rearview
Mirror – If Equipped,
Infrared Sensor (IR) –
If Equipped, Multi-
function Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor Sys-
tem (TPMS) – If
Equipped, Transfer
Case Module – If
Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M16
—
10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)/
Occupant Classifica-
tion Module (OCM)
M17
—
15 Amp
Blue
Left Park/Side
Marker/Running/Tail
Lights, License Lights
M18
—
15 Amp
Blue
Right Park/Side
Marker/Running/Tail
Lights
M19
—
25 Amp
Natural
Auto Shut Down
(ASD) #1 and #2
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M20
—
15 Amp
Blue
Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center
(EVIC) – If Equipped,
Interior Lighting,
Steering Wheel
Switches – If
Equipped, Switch
Bank
M21
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Shut Down
(ASD) #3
M22
—
10 Amp
Red
Right Horn
M23
—
10 Amp
Red
Left Horn
M24
—
25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M25
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump/Diesel
Lift Pump
M26
—
10 Amp
Red
Power MIRRORS
Switch/Drivers Win-
dow Switch
M27
—
10 Amp
Red
Steering Column
Lock, Wireless Igni-
tion Node (WIN)/
PEM
M28
—
10 Amp
Red
NGC (Powertrain
Control Module)/
Transmission Feed
(Batt)
M29
—
10 Amp
Red
Occupant Classifica-
tion Module (OCM)
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M30
—
15 Amp
Blue
Rear Wiper Module
Module/Power Fold-
ing Mirror, J1962 Diag
Feed
M31
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lights
M32
—
10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
M33
—
10 Amp
Red
NGC (Powertrain
Control Module) Bat-
tery Feed/TCM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M34
—
10 Amp
Red
Power Assist Module,
HVAC Module, Head-
lamp Washers, Com-
pass Module – If
Equipped, Flashlight
– If Equipped, RAD
Fan Diesel
M35
—
10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
M36
—
20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #3
(Batt)
M37
—
10 Amp
Red
Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP), Stop Light
Switch
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M38
—
25 Amp
Natural
Lock/Unlock Motors
K1
—
— Ignition Run/
Accessory Relay
K2 — — Ignition Run Relay
K3 — — Starter Solenoid Relay
K4
—
— Ignition Run/Start
Relay
K5
—
— (NGC) Powertrain
Control Module
Relay/PCM
K6
—
— Electric Back Light
(EBL) Relay
K7 — — —
K8 — — —
K9 — — Rear Blower Relay
K10
—
— ASD Relay (Feed for
M19 and M21)
K11
—
— Radiator Fan Relay
Low Speed
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery. You may:
•
Remove the IOD (Ignition Off-Draw) mini-fuses from
the Totally Integrated Power Module located in the
engine compartment.
•
Or, disconnect the battery negative cable.
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) ........ 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps
(Optional LED) ......................... LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Glove Box Lamp ......................... 194
Cargo Lamp ............................ 579
Optional Door Map
Pocket/Cupholder .......................LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlamp..................... 9006
High Beam Headlamp .................... 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal ................. 3757AK
Side Marker Lamp........................ 168
Front Fog Lamp ......................PSX24W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) ....... LED(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal ...............3157K
Rear Tail .............................3157K
Backup Lamp ......................... 3157K
License Lamp ...........................168
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp, Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left
headlamp housing.
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the
headlamp housing.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate it
1
⁄
4
turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right
front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the
wheel well.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector
1
⁄
4
turn clockwise
to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Tail/Stop Lamp, Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Tail
Lamp, Backup Lamp
The taillamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Changing the Tail/Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
taillamp housing.
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on
the inboard side of the taillamp housing with the other
hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to
disengage the taillamp housing from the vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillamp housing and rotate the connector
1
⁄
4
turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.
Changing the Tail Lamp or Backup Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillamp hous-
ing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate.
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the taillamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
taillamp housing from the liftgate.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
housing and rotate the connector
1
⁄
4
turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
1 — Tail Lamp Bulb
2 — Backup Lamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that
position.
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector
1
⁄
4
turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks in
the housing.
License Lamp
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models with 2.4L PZEV Engine 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models without 2.4L PZEV and 3.5L Engine 20.5 Gallons 77.6 Liters
All-Wheel Drive Models 21 Gallons 79.8 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
3.5L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
2.4L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.9 Quarts 7.5 Liters
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters
3.5L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
9.8 Quarts 9.3 Liters
3.5L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.5L Engine
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.044 in [1.12 mm])
Spark Plugs – 3.5L Engine ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.5L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) MOPAR威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) MOPAR威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type,
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con-
trol System. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
❏ Change Power Transfer Case (PTU) fluid.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and external filter.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.†
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid.
❏ Change Power Transfer Case (PTU) fluid.
❏ Change the automatic transmission and fluid.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (2.4L Engine).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 479
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 479
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 479
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 479
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 479
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 480
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 480
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 480
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 481
▫ Service Contract ..................... 481
䡵 Warranty Information .................. 482
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 482
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 482
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 482
▫ In Canada ......................... 483
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423–6343
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
480 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call 1-800-485-
2001).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to: Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .................... 312,315
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .........193,316,317
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........426
Adding Fuel ........................... 357
Adding Washer Fluid .....................420
Additives, Fuel ......................... 355
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 412
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 414
Air Conditioning .....................270,274
Air Conditioning Controls ............... 270,274
Air Conditioning Filter ................. 288,416
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............289
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ................ 283
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 414,415
Air Conditioning System .......... 270,274,277,414
Air Pressure, Tires .................... 191,336
Airbag .............................. 54,64
Airbag Deployment ....................... 66
Airbag Light .....................63,68,86,197
Airbag Maintenance .......................67
Airbag, Side ........................57,61,64
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 58,61,64
Alarm, Panic ............................23
Alarm (Security Alarm) ................. 17,185
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............17
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................... 307
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................... 257
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 425,426,455
Disposal ............................ 428
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............316,317
Anti-Lock Warning Light .............193,317,319
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........17
Anti-Theft System ....................... 185
Appearance Care ........................ 435
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) ......... 17
Audio Systems (Radio) ....................251
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
488 INDEX
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................30
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 95
Automatic Door Locks .....................30
Automatic Headlights ....................122
Automatic Oil Change Indicator .......... 188,205
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........277
Automatic Transaxle ................... 298,432
Adding Fluid ................... 432,434,457
Filter ...............................434
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 434
Fluid Level Check ...................432,434
Interlock System ....................300,301
Reset Mode ..........................304
Selection Of Lubricant ...................457
Shifting ............................. 298
Special Additives ...................... 434
Autostick .............................305
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ......150
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................150
Back-Up Lights .........................452
Battery ............................... 413
Charging System Light .................. 190
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ....... 24
Location ............................ 413
Belts, Seat ............................ 41,86
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............417
Booster Seat ............................ 73
B-Pillar Location ........................331
Brake Assist System ...................... 319
Brake Assist Warning Light ................. 194
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 317
Brake Fluid ............................ 457
Brake, Parking ..........................312
Brake System ........................ 315,430
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................316,317
Fluid Check .......................430,457
Master Cylinder .......................430
Parking ............................. 312
10
INDEX 489
Warning Light ........................195
Brakes ............................. 315,430
Brake/Transaxle Interlock ..................300
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........83
Bulb Replacement ..................... 449,450
Bulbs, Light ..........................88,449
Calibration, Compass ..................201,209
Camera, Rear ...........................137
Capacities, Fluid ........................455
Caps, Filler
Fuel ............................... 357
Oil (Engine) ....................403,404,411
Power Steering ........................312
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............... 427
Car Washes ............................ 435
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............85,356
Cargo Area Cover .......................168
Cargo Area Features ......................165
Cargo Compartment ...................... 165
Light ............................ 128,165
Luggage Carrier ....................... 173
Cargo Light ............................ 128
Cargo Load Floor ........................166
Cargo Management System .................166
Rollaway Tonneau Cover ................ 168
Tri-Fold Load Floor .....................166
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................ 167
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ................ 166,359
CD (Compact Disc) Player .................251
Cellular Phone .................. 98,251,252,269
Certification Label ....................... 359
Chains, Tire ............................343
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 381
Charging System Light .................... 190
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 327
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............406
490 INDEX
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............84
Checks, Safety ........................... 84
Child Booster Seat ........................73
Child Restraint .................. 71,72,75,79,81
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 77,79
Child Safety Locks ........................32
Clean Air Gasoline .......................354
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 437
Windshield Wiper Blades ................418
Climate Control .........................269
Clock ........................ 215,231,240,252
Coin Holder ........................... 158
Cold Weather Operation ...................296
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............268
Compact Spare Tire ......................338
Compass ........................198,201,208
Compass Calibration ..................201,209
Compass Variance .................... 200,209
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 206
Connector
UCI ................................ 263
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........263
Conserving Fuel ........................ 206
Console, Floor ..........................158
Console, Overhead ....................... 139
Contract, Service ........................ 481
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........427
Cooling System .........................424
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 426
Coolant Capacity ...................... 455
Coolant Level ...................... 424,428
Disposal of Used Coolant ................428
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................425
Inspection ...........................428
Points to Remember ....................428
Pressure Cap ......................... 427
Radiator Cap ......................... 427
10
INDEX 491
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......425,455,456
Temperature Gauge ....................183
Corrosion Protection .....................435
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............. 134
Cruise Light ...........................190
Cupholders ......................... 156,440
Customer Assistance .....................479
Customer Programmable Features ............ 210
Daytime Running Lights ................... 125
Dealer Service .......................... 407
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 172
Defroster, Windshield ............. 86,271,272,282
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 130
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 405
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player .............251
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 127
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle ................. 432,434
Oil (Engine) ..........................409
Power Steering ........................312
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................... 398
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............428
Engine Oil ........................... 412
Door Locks .............................28
Door Locks, Automatic ....................30
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 140
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................307
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................308
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) .... 261
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 96
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......150
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 150
Electronic Brake Control System .............317
492 INDEX
Anti-Lock Brake System .................316
Brake Assist System ....................319
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................320
Electronic Stability Program ...............321
Traction Control System ................. 320
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .............320
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 134
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) .........194,321
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 189
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) ............................. 137,202
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 396
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 380
Jacking .............................381
Jump Starting ......................... 392
Overheating ..........................380
Towing ............................. 398
Emission Control System Maintenance ......406,460
Engine .......................... 83,403,404
Air Cleaner .......................... 412
Block Heater ......................... 297
Break-In Recommendations ................83
Checking Oil Level ..................... 409
Compartment ......................... 403
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................424,456
Cooling ............................. 424
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 39,85,356
Fails to Start ..........................296
Flooded, Starting ...................... 296
Fuel Requirements ..................... 353
Jump Starting ......................... 392
Oil ........................... 409,455,456
Oil Change Interval ...............188,205,410
Oil Filler Cap ...................403,404,411
Oil Filter ............................412
Oil Filter Disposal ..................... 412
Oil Selection .......................410,455
10
INDEX 493
Oil Synthetic .........................411
Operation ............................83
Overheating ..........................380
Starting .............................295
Temperature Gauge ....................183
Engine Oil Viscosity ......................411
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 65
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 18
Ethanol ...............................354
Exhaust Gas Caution .................39,85,356
Exhaust System .......................85,421
Express Down Windows ................... 23
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................96
Exterior Light Service .....................450
Exterior Lights ........................ 88,450
Fabric Care ............................438
Filler Location Fuel ...................... 357
Filters
Air Cleaner .......................... 412
Air Conditioning ....................288,416
Automatic Transaxle ....................434
Engine Oil ........................412,456
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 412
Flashers
Hazard Warning ....................... 380
Turn Signal ...................... 88,126,185
Flash-To-Pass ...........................127
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 296
Floor Console .......................... 158
Fluid, Brake ...........................457
Fluid Capacities .........................455
Fluid Leaks .............................88
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ................. 432,434
Brake ............................ 430,457
Cooling System .......................424
494 INDEX
Engine Oil ........................... 409
Power Steering .....................312,457
Fluids ................................ 456
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 456
Fog Light Service ........................451
Fog Lights .................... 121,125,184,451
Folding Rear Seat ..................... 117,109
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 396
Fuel ................................. 353
Adding ............................. 357
Additives ............................ 355
Clean Air ............................354
Conserving ..........................206
Ethanol ............................. 354
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................357
Gasoline ............................ 353
Gauge .............................. 183
Materials Added .......................355
Methanol ............................ 354
Octane Rating ......................353,456
Requirements .........................353
Saver Mode .......................... 206
Specifications .........................456
Tank Capacity ........................ 455
Fuel System Caution ..................... 358
Fueling ............................... 357
Fuses ................................440
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........140
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............357,405
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ................... 183
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................354
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................353
Conserving ..........................206
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 354
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ...................183
Fuel ............................... 183
10
INDEX 495
Odometer ...........................186
Speedometer ......................... 185
Tachometer .......................... 186
Gear Ranges ...........................301
Gearshift ..............................301
General Information ...............17,25,306,352
General Maintenance ..................... 408
Glass Cleaning ..........................439
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 360,362
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............360,361
GVWR ............................... 360
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) ......... 98,251,252
Hard Drive (HDD) ....................... 251
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Shallow Standing Water .................308
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................380
Head Restraints ......................... 105
Headlights .......................... 121,122
Automatic ........................... 122
Bulb Replacement ......................450
Cleaning ............................ 439
Delay ..............................123
High Beam .......................... 450
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........ 127
Lights On Reminder .................... 125
On With Wipers ....................123,132
Passing .............................127
Switch ........................... 121,122
Time Delay ..........................123
Heated Mirrors .......................... 97
Heated Seats ...........................108
Heater .............................270,274
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 297
High Beam Indicator ..................... 185
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch ........................127
496 INDEX
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 366
Holder, Coin ........................... 158
Holder, Cup ...........................156
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 140
Hood Release ..........................119
Ignition ............................... 14
Key ...............................12,14
Ignition Key Removal ..................... 14
Illuminated Entry ........................18
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Indicator, Traction Control .................193
Infant Restraint ........................71,72
Inflation Pressure Tires .................... 191
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 202
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 94
Instrument Cluster .................... 182,183
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 181
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 438
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............439
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............440
Interior Appearance Care .................. 438
Interior Lighting ......................121,127
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........130
Introduction ............................. 4
Inverter, Power .........................153
Jack Location ...........................382
Jack Operation ....................... 381,387
Jacking Instructions ......................387
Jump Starting .......................... 392
Key, Programming ........................ 17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Key-In Reminder .........................15
Keyless Entry System ......................19
10
INDEX 497
Keys ................................. 12
Knee Bolster ............................ 54
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............126
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................41
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) ............................ 77,79
Latch Plate .............................42
Latches ................................88
Hood ............................... 119
Lead Free Gasoline ......................353
Leaks, Fluid ............................88
Life of Tires ............................341
Liftgate ................................38
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .............171
Light Bulbs .......................... 88,449
Light Replacement ....................... 450
Lights ...........................88,121,450
Airbag ........................ 63,68,86,197
Anti-Lock ...........................319
Anti-Lock Warning ..................... 193
Automatic Headlights ................... 122
Back-Up ............................ 452
Battery Saver ......................... 128
Brake Assist Warning ................194,324
Brake Warning ........................195
Bulb Replacement ......................450
Cargo .............................. 128
Courtesy/Reading ..................... 127
Cruise .............................. 190
Daytime Running ...................... 125
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............121,127
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ....................... 194,322,324
Electronic Throttle Control Warning ......... 189
Exterior .............................. 88
Fog .......................... 125,184,451
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 380
498 INDEX
Headlight Switch ................... 121,122
Headlights ........................ 122,450
Headlights On Reminder .................125
Headlights On With Wipers ............123,132
High Beam ..................... 127,185,450
High Beam Indicator ....................185
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............. 127
Illuminated Entry .......................18
Instrument Cluster .................. 121,183
Interior .............................127
License ............................. 454
Lights On Reminder .................... 125
Low Fuel ......................... 183,184
LowTire ............................ 191
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........193
Map Reading ......................... 127
Oil Pressure .......................... 189
Park .......................... 121,122,450
Passing .............................127
Rear Servicing .....................450,452
Rear Tail ............................452
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 186
Service ........................... 449,450
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 193
Side Marker .......................... 450
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........ 191,344
Traction Control ................. 193,322,324
Turn Signal ............. 88,121,126,185,450,452
Vanity Mirror ..........................97
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 183
Load Floor, Cargo .......................166
Loading Vehicle ......................359,361
Capacities ...........................361
Tires ...............................331
Locks .................................28
Auto Unlock .......................... 30
Child Protection ........................32
Door ................................ 28
10
INDEX 499
Power Door ........................... 29
Low Tire Pressure System ..................344
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................77,79
Lubrication, Body ....................... 417
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ................. 173
Lumbar Support ........................101
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 413
Maintenance, General ..................... 408
Maintenance Procedures ...................408
Maintenance Schedule ....................460
Maintenance, Sunroof ..................... 149
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 193,406
Manual, Service ......................... 483
Map/Reading Lights .....................127
Marker Lights, Side ......................450
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................430
Methanol .............................354
Mini-Trip Computer ...................198,206
Mirrors ............................. 94,140
Automatic Dimming .....................95
Electric Powered ....................... 96
Electric Remote ........................ 96
Exterior Folding ........................96
Heated .............................. 97
Outside ..............................95
Rearview .............................94
Vanity ...............................97
Mode
Fuel Saver ........................... 206
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............344
Mopar Parts .........................407,482
MP3 Player ............................251
MTBE/ETBE ........................... 354
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............121
500 INDEX
Navigation Radio (Uconnect威 gps) ........... 251
Navigation System (Uuconnect威 gps) .......137,251
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 83
Occupant Restraints ...................39,61,66
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ........... 57,58,61,64
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 353,456
Odometer
Trip .............................190,197
Oil Change Indicator ..................188,205
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .............. 188,205
Oil, Engine .........................409,456
Capacity ............................455
Change Interval .................. 188,205,410
Checking ............................ 409
Dipstick .............................409
Disposal ............................ 412
Filter ............................ 412,456
Filter Disposal ........................412
Identification Logo ..................... 410
Materials Added to ..................... 411
Recommendation ................... 410,455
Synthetic ............................411
Viscosity .......................... 411,455
Oil Filter, Change ........................412
Oil Filter, Selection .......................412
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 405,406
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 140
Operating Precautions .................... 405
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................95
Overdrive ..........................186,303
Overhead Console ....................... 139
Overheating, Engine ................... 184,380
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .......... 483
Paint Care .............................435
Panic Alarm ............................ 23
Parking Brake ..........................312
10
INDEX 501
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) .... 114
Passing Light ........................... 127
Personal Settings ........................ 210
Pets .................................. 83
Phone, Cellular ....................98,251,252
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) ........ 98,251,252
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 331
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ............... 251
USB ............................... 251
Power
Brakes .............................. 315
Door Locks ...........................29
Inverter ............................. 153
Mirrors ..............................96
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......... 150
Seats ............................... 104
Steering .......................... 311,312
Sunroof .............................147
Windows .............................34
Windows, Express Down ................. 23
Power Steering Fluid .....................457
Power Transfer Unit ...................... 457
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 53
Preparation for Jacking ....................383
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................47
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 210
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 19
Radial Ply Tires .........................338
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......... 427
Radio, Navigation (Uconnect威 gps) ...........251
Radio Operation ......................252,269
Radio Remote Controls ....................267
Radio, Satellite (Uconnect威 studios) . . . 251,252,256,261
Radio (Sound Systems) ....................251
502 INDEX
Rear Air Conditioning ....................283
Rear Camera ...........................137
Rear Cupholder ......................... 156
Rear Liftgate ............................ 38
Rear Seat, Folding ....................109,117
Rear Window Defroster ................... 172
Rear Window Features .................... 171
Rear Wiper/Washer ...................... 171
Rearview Mirrors ........................94
Reclining Front Seats ..................... 100
Reclining Rear Seats ...................112,117
Recreational Towing ...................... 377
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 354
Refrigerant ............................ 415
Release, Hood .......................... 119
Reminder, Lights On .....................125
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 52
Remote Control
Starting System ........................25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 267
Remote Starting System .................... 25
Replacement Bulbs .......................449
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts .......................407
Replacement Tires ....................... 341
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 482
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ........... 188,205
Restraint, Head .........................105
Restraints, Child .........................71
Restraints, Occupant ...................... 39
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ............... 168
Reverse Lights ..........................452
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................396
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ................. 173
Rotation, Tires .......................... 343
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................86
10
INDEX 503
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............88
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 482
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................... 39,85
Safety Information, Tire ................... 325
Safety Tips .............................84
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................257
Satellite Radio (Uconnect威 studios) . . . 251,252,256,261
Schedule, Maintenance ....................460
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 440
Seat Belt Reminder .......................52
Seat Belts ..........................39,41,86
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 45
And Pregnant Women ................... 53
Child Restraint ...................71,72,75,81
Extender .............................53
Front Seat ..........................41,42
Inspection ............................ 86
Operating Instructions ...................42
Pretensioners .......................... 47
Rear Seat .............................41
Reminder ............................186
Untwisting Procedure ....................46
Seats .................................98
Adjustment ........................... 98
Child Booster ..........................73
Easy Entry ...........................114
Heated .............................108
Height Adjustment ..................102,104
Lumbar Support ....................... 101
Power .............................. 104
Rear Folding ....................... 109,117
Reclining ............................100
Reclining Rear ..................... 112,117
Seatback Release .................102,109,117
Tilting .............................. 104
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............17,185
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........425,456
Selection of Oil ......................... 410
504 INDEX
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................16
Service Assistance ....................... 479
Service Contract ......................... 481
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................193
Service Manuals ........................ 483
Setting the Clock ................215,231,240,252
Settings, Personal ........................210
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle ....................298
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............45
Shoulder Belts ........................... 41
Side Airbag ............................. 64
Side View Mirror Adjustment ................95
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 287
Signals, Turn ...................88,126,185,452
Sirius Backseat TV™ (Uconnect威 studios) .......261
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............307
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................343
Snow Tires ............................ 343
Sound Systems (Radio) ....................251
Spare Tire .......................... 338,383
Spark Plugs ............................456
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ........................ 456
Oil .............................. 410,456
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............. 134
Speedometer ........................... 185
Starting ............................. 25,295
Automatic Transmission ................. 295
Cold Weather .........................296
Engine Fails to Start .................... 296
Remote .............................. 25
Starting and Operating .................... 295
Starting Procedures ...................... 295
10
INDEX 505
Steering
Column Lock .........................133
Power ...........................311,312
Tilt Column ..........................133
Wheel, Tilt ........................... 133
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ......................... 267
Storage ............................158,448
Storage, Vehicle ......................... 287
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 396
Sun Roof .............................. 147
Sun Visor Extension ....................... 98
Sunglasses Storage .......................140
Sunroof Maintenance .....................149
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 54
Sway Control, Trailer .................. 324,363
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 411
System, Navigation (Uconnect威 gps) ..........251
System, Remote Starting ....................25
Tachometer ............................ 186
Taillights ..............................452
Telescoping Steering Column ............... 133
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........277
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..........183
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 77
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................17
Theft System (Security Alarm) ............... 17
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................... 167
Tilt Steering Column .....................133
Time Delay, Headlight ....................123
Tip Start ...............................14
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........331
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 329
Tire Markings .......................... 325
Tire Safety Information ....................325
Tires ............................88,335,485
Aging (Life of Tires) .................... 341
Air Pressure ..........................335
506 INDEX
Chains ..............................343
Changing ............................381
Compact Spare ........................ 338
General Information .................... 335
High Speed ..........................337
Inflation Pressures ..................... 336
Jacking .............................381
Life of Tires .......................... 341
Load Capacity .....................331,332
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 344
Quality Grading ....................... 485
Radial .............................. 338
Replacement .........................341
Rotation ............................ 343
Safety ...........................325,335
Sizes ............................... 327
Snow Tires ........................... 343
Spare Tire ........................... 383
Spinning ............................339
Trailer Towing ........................ 372
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 340
To Open Hood ..........................119
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 369
Towing ...............................361
Behind a Motor Home .................. 377
Disabled Vehicle .......................398
Guide ..............................367
Recreational ..........................377
Weight ..............................367
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home .........377
Traction ..............................308
Traction Control ......................193,320
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ................. 324
Trailer Towing .......................... 361
Cooling System Tips .................... 377
Hitches .............................366
Minimum Requirements .................370
Tips ................................375
10
INDEX 507
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 369
Wiring ..............................374
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 367
Trailer Weight ..........................367
Transaxle
Additives ............................ 434
Automatic ........................298,432
Autostick ............................ 305
Filter ...............................434
Maintenance ......................... 432
Operation ........................... 298
Overdrive ...........................303
Selection of Lubricant ...................457
Transmission .....................See Transaxle
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 140
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 19
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........19
Transporting Pets ........................83
Tread Wear Indicators ....................340
Trip Computer ..........................198
Trip Odometer .......................... 186
Trip Odometer Reset Button .............190,197
Turn Signals ...................121,126,185,452
UCI Connector .........................263
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ........... 98,251
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 485
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 263
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port .............. 251
Universal Transmitter .....................140
Unleaded Gasoline .......................353
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............46
Upholstery Care ........................438
USB Port ..............................251
508 INDEX
Vanity Mirrors ...........................97
Variance, Compass ....................200,209
Vehicle Certification Label .................359
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ................... 332,359,361
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .......................287,448
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 17
Video Entertainment System™
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................261
Viscosity, Engine Oil ......................411
Voice Recognition System (VR) ............... 98
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 380
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............183
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information ..................... 482
Washer, Adding Fluid .....................420
Washers, Windshield ................ 128,131,420
Washing Vehicle ......................... 435
Water
Driving Through ...................... 308
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................437
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................437
Wheel Nut Torque ....................... 392
Wind Buffeting .......................37,149
Window Fogging ........................ 287
Windows ..............................34
Power ............................... 34
Windows, Express Down ................... 23
Windshield Defroster ......................86
Windshield Washers ................... 128,131
Fluid ............................... 420
10
INDEX 509
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................418
Windshield Wipers ....................... 128
Wiper Blade Replacement .................. 418
Wiper, Delay ........................... 130
Wiper, Rear ............................ 171
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 130
Wrecker Towing .........................398
510 INDEX
Chrysler Group LLC
10D41-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
